tap & hold the screen to show the top bar · adriana mendez adriana laura mendez is a jewelry...
TRANSCRIPT
Tap amp Hold the screen to show the top bar
HOME Tap to return to the app home page
How to
use this
app
Tap amp Hold the screen to show the top bar
Swipe Horizontally to quickly navigate pagesTap selected page to View
Swipe
Horizontally
to go to the
next page
EDITORrsquoS NOTE
FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Caged Cabachon Earrings by Sky Aldovino
bull Introduction to the Peruvian Point by
Adriana Mendez
bull Wire Crochet Ring by Adriana Mendez
bull RECOMMENDED JEWELRY MAKING SUPPLIES
FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Wire Wrapped Earrings by Kornelia
Kubinowska
bull Pearl Bangle by Irene Adler
bull Double Helix Earrings by Danielle
Lewandowski
bull Edelweiss Pendant by Joanna Kun
CONTENTS
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
CONTENTS
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
FEATURED ARTICLE
bull Wire Wrapped Beauties
JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Lucky Stud Earrings by Sky Aldovino
bull Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet by
Carolyn Conley
RECOMMENDED READINGS
bull Wire Wrapping The Basics And Beyond
bull A Beginners Guide to Wire Wrapping
bull Fine Art Wire Weaving
bull Wirework wDVD
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom
Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom
Join The Fun
In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire
jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires
Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the
oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When
making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials
because only wire is the main material but having the
right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun
experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry
tutorials today
Editorrsquos Note
Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making
Jane Chew
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads
The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon
Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers
Skill Level- Beginner
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers
Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon
Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral
Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon
Side view
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
EDITORrsquoS NOTE
FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Caged Cabachon Earrings by Sky Aldovino
bull Introduction to the Peruvian Point by
Adriana Mendez
bull Wire Crochet Ring by Adriana Mendez
bull RECOMMENDED JEWELRY MAKING SUPPLIES
FEATURED JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Wire Wrapped Earrings by Kornelia
Kubinowska
bull Pearl Bangle by Irene Adler
bull Double Helix Earrings by Danielle
Lewandowski
bull Edelweiss Pendant by Joanna Kun
CONTENTS
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
CONTENTS
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
FEATURED ARTICLE
bull Wire Wrapped Beauties
JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Lucky Stud Earrings by Sky Aldovino
bull Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet by
Carolyn Conley
RECOMMENDED READINGS
bull Wire Wrapping The Basics And Beyond
bull A Beginners Guide to Wire Wrapping
bull Fine Art Wire Weaving
bull Wirework wDVD
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom
Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom
Join The Fun
In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire
jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires
Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the
oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When
making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials
because only wire is the main material but having the
right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun
experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry
tutorials today
Editorrsquos Note
Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making
Jane Chew
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads
The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon
Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers
Skill Level- Beginner
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers
Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon
Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral
Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon
Side view
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
CONTENTS
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
FEATURED ARTICLE
bull Wire Wrapped Beauties
JEWELRY MAKING TUTORIALS
bull Lucky Stud Earrings by Sky Aldovino
bull Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet by
Carolyn Conley
RECOMMENDED READINGS
bull Wire Wrapping The Basics And Beyond
bull A Beginners Guide to Wire Wrapping
bull Fine Art Wire Weaving
bull Wirework wDVD
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom
Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom
Join The Fun
In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire
jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires
Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the
oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When
making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials
because only wire is the main material but having the
right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun
experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry
tutorials today
Editorrsquos Note
Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making
Jane Chew
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads
The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon
Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers
Skill Level- Beginner
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers
Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon
Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral
Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon
Side view
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Blog wwwhandmade-jewelry-clubcom
Membership wwwdiyjewelrymakingcom
Join The Fun
In this months issue we bring to you beautiful wire
jewelry tutorials for you to have fun with wires
Wirework and wire wrapping is known to be one of the
oldest methods to make handmade jewelry When
making wire jewelry you dont need a lot of materials
because only wire is the main material but having the
right tools is essential to make wire jewelry a fun
experience Have some fun with these wire jewelry
tutorials today
Editorrsquos Note
Welcome to DIY Jewelry Making
Jane Chew
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads
The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon
Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers
Skill Level- Beginner
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers
Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon
Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral
Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon
Side view
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
We have seen caged beads pearls or any rounded beads with holes but in thistutorial well teach you how to cage cabochons that quickly you can turn intoearrings You can apply this technique on any size of cabochon or any time of flatback dome shape beads
The tutorial is catered for beginners It has in-depth instructions and ultra-clearclose-up photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
Materials Needed- 20ga Craft wire- 13mm Round Cabochon
Tools Needed- Wire cutter- Flat nose pliers
Skill Level- Beginner
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers
Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon
Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral
Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon
Side view
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 10 inches 20ga wire and at 2-inch mark make a loopwith your round nose pliers
Step 2Create the base to where the cabochon will lay flatUsing your flat nose pliers to hold the 1st loop continue tomake loops with your other hand following the shape ofyour 1st loop Make loops as many times as needed untilthe diameter is about the same size as the cabochon
Once you have reached the size of the cabochon make1 more loop so the base is 1 loop bigger than yourcabochon and then place your cabochon on the spiralbaseSlightly pull the last loop upward against the cabochon toprevent the cabochon from sliding or falling off the spiral
Then using your thumb and forefingers hold the cabochon and spiral base firmlyUsing your free or other hand continue to make rounds of spirals going upward the cabochon The rounds must get smaller as it reaches the top of the cabochon
Side view
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
and then cut the excess wire You now have caged thecabochon
Step 3Lets turn your caged cabochon into an earring Flip yourcabochon and look at the back side
Using a rounded object shape the extended wire into anearring Cut the excess wire about the same width of thecabochon
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Caged Cabachon Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Working with fine wire is enormously creative in fact with a wire of sufficient quality and appropriate thicknessthe possibilities are endless The chain taught below and the Peruvian point are but a couple of the multiplebraided textile jobs They are very easy pieces to do for which we require a crochet needle and a fine thread ofsilver gold or copper With proper quality wire you can improve and vary the type of point being able to performany artisanal craft
The Peruvian point is the weaving of rings strung together creating a smooth compact frame and beauty that amachine could not perform as it is only achieved with dedication and artisan hands This beautiful technique wascreated in 1992 by Juan Pacheco since he was in the need to build sculptures with flexible and uniform mesh
Types of WireSilver WireIf you choose to work with silver wire this is a very malleable metal and like gold in its pure state it is very softWhen paired with copper it acquires greater hardness and strength but it also becomes more oxidized Wiregauges will depend on the work being done It is necessary that the wire possesses ductility for that it has to gothrough an annealing process to be ductile and suitable to work with If the metal did not go through this processit would start to crack and split
9999 pure silver (Unlike the 925 and 950 which are alloys of silver and copper)
It is a clear and bright metal gray It can be used for just pure woven silver jewelry since if there is alloy this wouldbecome stiff and difficult to weaveIt is also subjected to an annealing process to achieve greater ductility There are different sizes and thicknessesTo facilitate the work is recommended to use thicknesses 28 to 34 gauge (033 015 mm)
Yellow Gold WireThe 18K yellow gold usually binds with a link made of half of copper and half silver According to the proportions tobe used different color and hardness will be obtained The more copper the alloy contains the redder and harderthe metal will be And the more silver it has the softer and yellower it will be For the heat treatment it isnecessary to do two points before the final gauge otherwise it will be too soft
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Enameled Copper WireIt is a reddish-brown metal shiny ductile and very malleable The enameled copper is a noble metal that does not stain the skin as it does not oxidize nor cause allergies to whomever wears jewelrymade from this material If the choice is bare copper to for weaving it should be overcookedAll thicknesses are easy to work with the hook because of its ductility
Thicknesses of WiresIn the tutorials we usually use thicknesses of gold and silver wire in 022 mm and 030 mmExample 025 mm is 30 gaugeUsually in our works we can use the doubles and triples (2 strands and 3 strands woven together) and we can usethat generally in most of the works shown in the tutorials that would be 030 mm 28 gaugeIn the following table we can observe that when we are ordering the wire in gauge and mm we can understandthe relationship that is establishedAlways look up to the table when you are buying wire according to the country where you are
AWG (American Wire Gauge) MM (Diameter)
How to Choose the Needles or Crochet HooksThe crochet hook is used to work with thread or yarn using a short specific needle crochet or crochet needleof metal plastic or wood There are different brands in the market the metric system is the only consistentmeasurement scale and is included along with the size indicator on each hook
The steel crochet needles are numbered from the largest measures as 00 (350 mm) to the smallest 14 gauge (075mm) The choice of the diameter of crochet needle has a direct relationship to the diameter of the wire that isgoing to make up the weave The bigger the needle the bigger the point and the work will not be strong Irecommend knitting with small diameters to achieve very delicate weaving a compact look and features thatmake it look like they have been made by a ldquomachinerdquo so perfect and harmonious
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Steel HooksNumerical equivalents and metric sizes
00helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip350 MM0helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip325 MM1helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip275 MM2helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip225 MM3helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip210 MM4helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip200 MM5helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip190 MM6helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip180 MM7helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip165 MM8helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip150 MM
Range of Finishes and StylesEvery piece of jewelry receives a clamping mechanism to hold Often performing a closure enabling hold braceletsnecklaces earrings brooches or anything else that may be a magnetic closure a screw closure snap closure typetube closures for bracelets snap fasteners required
ToolsRound nose pliers smaller pliers needle nose pliers wire cutter tweezers chain nose pliers etc
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Introduction to the Peruvian Point
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Make a Chain With Peruvian PointThe material on the illustration is copper wire of 030 mm
The crochet is No 1 Silver brand (275 mm)
Position of the threadThe starting position of the wire is above the middle finger it covers the middle finger it
passes under the little finger and it is held down by the thumb
The crochet is taken with the right hand always with the crochet hook looking to the left
B) CHAINSteps 1
Form a ring you can call it a loop or an e to fit the diameter of crochet
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Match the thickness of this ring to the crochet
introducing it to the thickest part
Step 3With the crochet needle in position on the right
pass the wire over it to be pulled
Step 4With the crochet hook take the wire and bring it closer to the loop from which we are taking the
point and push the hook to make the point Always hold the point with your thumb
Pull the wire to form the point
Step 5Rounding the point adjust the wire to the
thickness of the crochet for that I move the crochet to the middle
Step 6Rotate the crochet at an angle of 90 degrees to
set the point
Step 7Place the crochet in position to take the
crochet hook to the beginning of the next point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 8Start the next point
Step 9With the crochet needle on the right side take
the wire out and place it below the needle
Step 10Pull the wire to form the point
Step 11Adjust the hoop To round I turn the crochet
needle to the larger diameter portion
Step 12Rotate the crochet needle to a 90 degree
angle to adjust the point
Step 13We move the crochet needle to the tip of it to
weave the following point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 14Now we have woven 3 points We carry the crochet needle to the end of it put it on the
right and pass the wire underneath to pull it and knit a 4 point
Continue with the steps above until we have a chain of the desired length
Step by Step to Weave the Peruvian PointWe have already learned how to weave the chain which is the basis to continue
teaching the Peruvian Point
Here is a detailed step by step
Step 1We have woven the chain to the desired length
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 2Join the first point to the last point
Step 3With the 2 points mounted past the wire from right to left under the crochet to generate a loop
Step 4Pull the wire towards us to generate the point
Step 5Move the crochet horizontally to generate the largest
diameter for the point and we round it
Step 6Rotate the crochet forward to an upright position of 90 deg to set the point The point is locked it is the first
high point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 7Place the crochet with the bevel on the edge of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet
from right to left ready to pull the increase
Step 8 Pull the wire put the crochet into the thickest part to
mark the ring
Step 9Jump 1 point and the previous loop we join together with the next point These points of double wire are
called low points
Step 10I take my crochet to larger diameter portion to
generate the diameter and rounding
Step 11Place the crochet with the crochet hook on the edge
of the point facing left the wire passes under the crochet and it is ready to pull
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 12Pull the increase this increase allows me to move
forward we round it We have our second high point
Step 13Jump 1 point and the previous loop join together in the next point These points with double wire we will
call lows We have our second low point on We continue the sequence until the entire wheel has
been woven
Graphic of the Peruvian Point weave high points and low points
Step 14Image of the first full round In the second round we
will only weave the high points
Materials to Create the Wire Crochet Ring- Copper wire 030mm (28 gauge)
- Crochet needle nordm 4 (2mm)- Faceted black and clear crystals
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step by Step to Knit the Wire Crochet RingThe flat mesh woven with crochet needles in Peruvian Point is a basic mesh to knit
bracelets necklaces and the ring holder In all you can increase the number of wires and weave the mesh with two three or more wires
The increase of wires will give you more resistance without taking away the softness and flexibility of the
weaveWeave a chain of rings based on the Peruvian point of
our ring width in this case it is 5 rings
From the 5th point pull the wire as if we were going to make another ring and then round it up
Place the chain horizontally and the point that we pull we take with the crochet needle vertically to lock
it
Pass the wire under the crochet
Pull the loop
The loop we pulled on the previous point gets connected to the next point and now begin weaving the Peruvian
Point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire
Continue on the next point weaving the Peruvian Point
When you reach the last point take the loop of the previous point and connect it to the last point
Pass the loop under the crochet needle
Pull and go round the point with the crochet needle horizontally
Place the needle vertically to lock the point with this movement the point rises and rises up to the height of the
others help lock it with your finger
Withdraw the needleThis is the 1st row
Turn the weave which as the last point in the above photo on the left and is now the 1st on the right
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pull the wire back Introduce the crochet needle in the 1st point
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Merge it to the 2nd point introducing the crochet needle therein
Pass the wire under the crochet needle to pull the loop and knit the Peruvian Point in the following points
The loop on the 4th point is merged to the 5th point by introducing the crochet
Pull the loop and round it up to the larger diameter portion of our needle
Pass the wire under the crochet needle
Place the crochet needle vertically to adjust the point
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
Turn the weave to continue weaving the third row until you obtain the desired length
To join the 2 ends take a fine needle and with 20 mm wire begin sewing ring to ring
(I have 5 rings on each side)
Withdraw the crochet needle and weave the 2nd row
With flat pliers go over it to make sure that there are no imperfections
And we sew the crystals chosen for design
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Crochet Ring
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Adriana Mendez
Adriana Laura Mendez is a jewelry designer that has always been passionate aboutthe world of fashion and jewelry In 2005 she started designing jewelry as a hobbyuntil she perfected it Three years later along with her son Julian Oribe shedecided to launch her own jewelry company of wire crochet jewelry
Adriana specializes in the field of crochet jewelry in which she develops thePeruvian pointAfter creating numerous collections of jewels Adriana and Julian decided toexpand the knowledge of the art of wire crochet jewelry by selling innovativeEBooks
Visit me atwwwwirecrochettutorialscomwwwfacebookcomalmjewelrywwwtwittercomalmjewelrywwwyoutubecomalmjewelry
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Genuine Czech crystal from Preciosa is machine-cut for consistent sparkle and
brilliance in top fashion colors
Featured Jewelry Making Supplies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Preciosa Twintrade two-hole seed beads inspire creative possibilities for exciting
jewelry and bead-weaving designs
Red coral crystal pearls offer the look of polished coral with added strength and a
smooth finish
Uniform size and extra-large hole make Delicareg glass seed beads perfect for
uniform precision work
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- 2 round gem stones 8-10mm in diameter (I have used 8mm round gem stone balls)- 2 rings whose diameter should be 1mm larger than the one of the gem stone balls (ifusing a 04mm wire for wrapping the rings should be larger by 2mm than the stones)- 40cm (1575rdquo) 930 (sterling silver) wire 08mm in diameter- 2m (7874rdquo)wire 025mm in diameter sterling silver (930) or fine silver (999)(alternatively you can use a thicker wire)- 2 rings 4-5mm in diameter- ear wires- silver balls or small gem stones or any beads for entwining
Tools- round nosed pliers- cutting pliers- burner- marker
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
To make the task easier mark your pliers with amarker just a little below half way their lengthAlternatively you can use a tape for marking
At this stage you will need the 08mm wire One earring requires about 20cm (784rdquo) of wire
You can also heat the wire with a burner to make it more pliable With your marked pliers flex the wire into a series of loops bearing in mind that the curves
must be formed at the same marked place on the pliers
Keep twisting the wire into the loops until the twisted spiral is long enough to go round the whole ring
Mine has been made out of 11 loops
Now attach the spiral wire to the ring use 025mm wire about 40cm (1578rdquo) long
Start wrapping around the ring itself first then after the fourth or sixth wound attach the spiral by wrapping it
together with the ring as much as 3 times
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Now the last stage wrapping around the outer side of the spiral and entwining little beads
You will need 025mm wire 50-60cm (1969-2362rdquo) long First attach a little link between the beginning and the end of the
spiral Then entwine some little beads between the loops they can be silver or gem stones or any sorts of beads you like
(here I used 3mm sized beads)Remember to join the link and the end of the spiral too
Next keep wrapping a few times around the main ring as far as you reach another loop to wrap around This way attach the whole spiral with loop to the
ring
Now time to attach the gem stone to the middle of the earring
Now attach the ear wires (in my case lever back earrings) and your earrings are ready
I have also oxidized and polished my earrings This is what they look like when they are finished
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Wrapped Earrings
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Kornelia Kubinowska
My name is Kornelia and I create jewelry as Sunflower I live in wonderful city inPoland - Krakow All I know about jewelry I learned myself and now I teach otherpeople Jewelry is my full time job my passion I like to mix wire-wrapping withsoldering My favorite stone is labradorite
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopMadeBySunflowerMy blog httpmadebysunflowerblogspotcomPinterest httppinterestcommadebysunflowerFacebook httpwwwfacebookcompagesSunflower-Kornelia-Kubinowska197509000347951
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Materials- Copper or sterling wire round dead soft- 42rdquo (34 ft or 105 m) 18-gauge (1mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )20-gauge (05 mm) wire- 78ldquo(65 ft or 2 m )26-gauge (03 mm) wire- 6 beads diameter 5-8mm- 2 beads diameter 3-4mm
Tools- Pliers chainnose or flatnose roundnose- Flush cutters- Bench block or anvil- Hammer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step1In this tutorial I make the bangle on the wrist 15-17 cmof length Cut 18-gauge wire on three equal partsLength of each part is approximately 35cm If you wantto make bracelet with another size increase ordecrease the length of each pieces of wire to thecorresponding number of centimeters (For example Ineed 14 cm wrist and I cut 33-34 cm of each peace ofwire)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Add those parts together and displace them fromeach other by 3 cm Tie the ends with a piece ofunnecessary wire
Mark the middle of all wires Total length is approx40cm there is middle of wire at 20cm marking
On both sides of the middle mark 75 (or 7 cm) Thereare left point and right point
Step 2Flash-cut 50 cm of 24-gauge wire and start wrappingfrom left point to right
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Make by two wraps on each wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
You can move the coils with chain nose pliers to each other
and two wraps on three wires together
Repeat Step 2 from left point to the right
point
and pressed flat to base wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
If a piece of 24-gauge wire to take over trim and tuck
the end Continue wrapping with new 50 cm piece of24-gauge wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The result of Step 2
Step 3Take any bottle of suitable size and bend the base ofthe bracelet
Bend left side wires down and right side wires up Allwires are numbered like photo
There is circle of base
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 4Wire number 1 make two loops in opposite directions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire number 2 make one loop
Make spiral with round nose pliers on the wire endnumber 1
Make one spiral on the end of wire number 3
and spiral on the wire end number 2 in oppositedirection
All spirals hammering on the bench block
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
That is the top part of bracelet
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat Step 4 for lower part of bangle
Step 5Decorate bangle with beads
Flash cut 50 cm of 26 gauge wire Wrap together wires No1 and
No2
With shorter end wrap two times on stem of spiral No2 two times
on stem of spiralNo1 forming a figure ndash 8 weave
String the 4mm bead
With longer end make 8-weave wrapping on the crossing parts of 1 and 2 wires
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
String 5-8 mm bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Make two wraps on other side of loop If possible stretch the wire back through the beads hole wrap the end of wire on
loops side trim and tuck the end
Step 6Flash cut 50 cm of 26gauge wire The middle of this wire
wrap on top of the loop(wire No1)
String the bead on two 26-gauge wires
Make with left wire end 8-weave wrapping to left part
In left part string big bead and wrap it to wire No3
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Weaving the right part from blue bead
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 7Repeat Step 4 -6 for another part of bangle
You can repeat step 4 ndash 6 in different variations as you wish )
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Pearl Bangle
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Irene Adler
I am an Ukranian artist But my family and I now live in Slovakia I love craftssince a young age and jewelry making has been my passion since 2007 Nowthe favorite hobby became a job and I am working in studio IrenAdler Naturemotives are the keynote of my jewelry collections Colorful autumn warmsummer or delicate spring gives wings to my imagination and the wires in myhands are turned into animals birds or flowers
Visit me athttpswwwetsycompeopleIrenAdlerhttpswwwfacebookcompagesIren-Adler310336609092301
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Expand your wire wrapping skills with these unique and elegant earrings
Materials- 18g Sterling Silver (30 inches)- 26g Sterling Silver (5 feet)- 20g Sterling Silver (4 inches)
Tool List ndash Donrsquot forget Safety Glasses- Ruler- Chasing Hammer- Steel Block- Round nose pliers- MaskingPainters tape- Wire cutters- Safety glasses- Liver of sulfur (optional)- Steel wool (optional if using LOS)- Sharpie marker- File- Flat nose bent nose pliers
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut 10 pieces of 3 inch long lengths of 18g wire
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hammer to flatten one end of each of the 10pieces you just cut Approx 14 inch flattenedUsing a file round of the edges of the flattened wireto look similar to the picture
Lay out 5 hammered pieces as shown
With wires laid out in a staggered pattern as showmeasure 2 frac14rdquo from the tip of the longest positionedwire and mark all wires with a sharpie (as shown)
Wrap all wires with tape at the mark you made inthe previous step
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Cut a 2 frac12 foot piece of 26g sterling wire Feed wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires leaving approx a 2inch tail towards the back of your group of wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrapping in a motion away from yourself hold thetail from behind and wrap the wire between thefront of the 1st and 2nd wire and wrap it backtowards the front again between the 2nd and 3rdwire Make another wrap going over the 1st wiretowards the back of the piece and coming back tothe front between the 1st and 2nd wire All wrapsmove in the same direction
Wrap around the 1st wire again towards the backand this time come back to the front between the2nd and 3rd wire
Wrap around the 2nd wire to the back of the piece
Wrap back towards the front between the 3rd and4th wire
Wrap around the 3rd wire towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wrap back towards the front between the 4th amp 5thwire (as shown)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap around the 4th wire towards the back of thepiece
Bring wire down below the 5th wire as shown
Wrap wire around the 5th wire so that the wrappingwire is now in the back between the 4th and 5thwires (as shown)
Using your flat or bent nose pliers gently push theentire weave towards the tape to line it up
Skip over the 5th wire and feed the wrapping wirebetween the 3rd and 4th wires towards the back
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back around to the front ofthe piece between the 4th and 5th wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Skip over the 4th wire and feed your wrapping wirebetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire back around the frontbetween the 3rd and 4th wires
Skip over the 3rd wire and bring the wrapping wiretowards the back between the 1st and 2nd wire
Bring the wrapping wire back towards the frontbetween the 2nd and 3rd wires
Bring the wrapping wire over the top of the 1st wiretowards the back of your piece
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Bring the wrapping wire back to the front betweenthe 1st and 2nd wires Gently push your weavetowards the masking tape after every top tobottom weave of all the wires
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Your weave pattern is beginning to take shape
Continue weaving until you reach the base of the1st and 5th flattened wires (weaving wire is behindmy fingers it is NOT cut off at this point)
This is what your piece should look like so far
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Continue with the same weave but skip the 1st and5th wires completely and just wrap the 2nd 3rd and4th wires until you reach the flattened base of the2nd and 4th wires
Wrap around the 3rd wire until you reach the baseof the flattened part Once yoursquove reached theflattened edge cut your wrapping wire Using yourflat pliers crimp the wrapping wire against the 3rdwire
This is what your piece should look likePut this piece down for now and wrap the otherearring exactly as you did the 1st one Refer backto all previous steps to this point to duplicate thenext piece
Holding your piece firmly with the front side facingyou remove the masking tape and bend the wiresas shown The 1st and 5th wires will be bent atapprox a 90 degree angle 2nd and 4th wires atabout a 45 degree angle and leave the 3rd wirestraight up for now
Wrap the tail that you left at the beginning of yourweaving around the 3rd (straight) wire about 7times then cut and crimp
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
With the tips of your round nose pliers turn 1st and5th wires one rotation upwards (as shown)
Holding the wire with your round nose pliers by thecircle you just created bend the wire inward asshown Bend the 5th wire towards the front Turn thepiece over so that the back of the piece is facingyou and bend the 1st wire (now in the 5th wiresrsquoposition) towards the front
Reposition the piece so that the front is once againfacing you Bend the 3rd wire towards the 5th wireas shown
Using a larger part of your round nose pliers (about5mm down from the tip) bend the 3rd wire asshown to create an open loop
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Using the tips of your round nose pliers bend the2nd and 4th wires downwards as shown
Using your round nose pliers gently grip the circlethat you just created on the 4th wire and position sshown above the 5th wire
Turn your piece over so the back is now facing youand repeat the above step with the 2nd wire that isnow in the 4th wirersquos position
Next step is to twist the entire piece until you have itpositioned the way you like it This will take a little bitof hand strength as the wires are now workhardened and stiffer from all of the weavingTwist the 2nd earring in the opposite directions soyou have a mirrored pair of twists
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
This is what your earrings should look like now
Final step is to attach ear wires Cut 2rdquo lengths of 20g wirewrap around a sharpie marker Curl the tip of each upwardswith round nose pliers Make a slight bend in the other endof the ear wire and file any sharp edges smooth Attachyour handmade ear wires to your earrings and enjoy yourbeautiful new pair of earrings
Shown here oxidized with Liver of Sulfur (optional)
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Double Helix Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Danielle Lewandowski
Before I created Bent amp Twisted I was enlisted in the US Air Force until I became amother and decided to give that life up to be the best mother I could be
My passion had been awakened and I had to figure out how to fulfill my own desireswithout dropping the many other balls I was juggling I decided to create somethingevery day even if I didnt like how it turned out
Through it all we released our first products and the response has been pure loveWe are so thankful to our loyal followers that have become our biggest cheerleadersrooting for our success Its been an amazing journey and we are so very grateful
Etsy httpswwwetsycomshopBentTwistedCreationsFacebook httpswwwfacebookcomBentNTwistedCreationsTwitter httpstwittercomBentTwistedCrtn
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
TECHNIQUE wire-wrapping basic weaving oxidation polishing OPTIONAL hammering
MATERIAL LIST FOR 3X3 CM (12X12 IN) PENDANT- 1 potato pearl 8mm- 25 cm (98 in) of 1 mm (18 ga) round sterling silver wire- 220 cm (866 in) of 04 mm (26 ga) round sterling silver wire- 5 sterling silver beads of 4mm- 5 sterling silver beads of 3 mm
OPTIONAL- 10 cm (39 in) of spare wire- spare bead 8mm
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
TOOL LIST- pencil- sheet of paper- tweezers- ruler- round nose pliers- bent nose pliers- wire cutters- permanent marker- masking tape- oxidizing product with everything required for oxidizing
with this kind of product- fine steel wool
OPTIONAL- metallic block or anvil- metallic hammer- polishing cloth
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 1Draw the flower Start by a circle that has to be of the same diameter as your bead
The circle shouldnrsquot touch the floral shape ndash you have to leave some space for the wire elementsNOTE You can also make a star using this technique
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Just draw the star shape instead and pay close attention to keep it regular
STEP 2 TIP You can easily measure the perimeter of the pearl by carefully applying a strip of
masking tape around the bead and trimming it right when the tape ends meet
Then stick the tape on the 1 mm (18 ga) wire and mark the length of the wire you need Add few mm more to have the circle that is bigger than the pearl about 05 mm on each side You
need to leave space for 04 mm (26 ga) wire that will be wrapped on it to fix the circle to the flower base Do not cut off the wire yet
STEP 3It is easier to form the circle when you work on longer piece of the wire Make the circle with round nose pliers before you cut it off the wire The circle does not have to be perfectly round It
wonrsquot be visible
NOTE It is always best to have a bit more than to have less
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 4Put the circle base aside and take the remaining piece of 1
mm (18 ga) wire 18 cm (71 in) is enough for a flower of 3x3cm (12x12 in) Bend it in the middle with the round nose
pliers to form the top of the first bottom petal Do not make it too pointed otherwise you will have difficulty in covering it
with the 04 mm (26 ga) wire coils
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 5 TIP The drawing and a permanent marker will help you to stick to your project
Mark the place where the wire should be bent and form the petals by curving the silver with the round nose pliers and bent nose pliers
You are going to make the same number of bends on each side
The floral base should be a bit smaller than the drawing as it will be covered with wire
NOTE It is not necessary to make the petals identical To some degree - unless you make a star - less it is symmetrical
more it seems to be natural and unique
STEP 6Apart from the petal you started in STEP 5 you
have to make another two ones and a half You can see on the photo at the left how to make
the last oneWhen the flower base is finished the
remaining tails will be of the similar length
STEP 7OPTIONAL
Using a hammer over an anvil flatten the entire piece a bit
NOTE You are free to skip this step however it is advisable to hammer the wire Not only because it makes the
structure more rigid and flat but also because the wire you will wrap on the floral structure will slide less The 04 mm (26 ga)
sterling silver wire can be sometimes really hard
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 8Cut 80 cm (315 in) of your 04 mm (26 ga) wire Leave at least 5 cm (2 in) of the tail and grab both 1 mm (18 ga) tails in the
middle Start to wrap them together towards the floral shape with 04 mm (26 ga) wire till the top of the petal
Secure the wire at the other end by coiling the 5 cm(2 in) tail at least once on each 1 mm (18 ga) wire Pay attention not
to break this wire during next stepsNOTE Donrsquot worry if the 1 mm (18 ga) tails wrapped together are
twisting
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 9To fill the petals inside you will be weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern During the work
keep the wire as loosely rounded as possible to avoid a risk of breaking Press the wire with your fingers to place it well before pulling
You will fill petals in clockwise direction
Coil the weaving wire over the right wire as close to the top of the petal as possible Use your finger to press it into place
NOTE If your weaving wire starts from the left side just wrap it in
the opposite direction
STEP 10Bring the weaving wire underneath the left wire Then pull it up over
the left wire and back up underneath the right wire
Next bring the weaving wire underneath the right wire Then pull it up over the right wire and back up underneath the left
wire
STEP 11Try to keep the coils as tight as possible and give it the
herringbone pattern by slightly curving the wire inside the petal in the ldquoV formrdquo
Continue weaving down to the bottom part of the petal
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 12When first petal is finished coil the wire once (if necessary) onto the right base wire and lay it under the next petal base Try to follow the shape of the petal with the wire Bend the
wire on the top in a way that it becomes nearly parallel to the right part of the petal base
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 13The wire leading from the previous petal should be kept
under the base all the time Wrap the wire onto the top of the petal base 4-5 times
STEP 14Use the bent nose pliers to put the wire in its right place if
necessary
STEP 15Keep on weaving in a ldquofigure 8rdquo pattern until the petal is finished
STEP 16TIP Using the first portion of 04 mm (26 ga) wire you will make 2 petals After finishing the second petal coil it once on the
floral base at the bottom of the second petal Do not cut off the wire It will be used later To avoid breaking hook the
remaining wire on the first tail It wonrsquot disturb you either while working on the following petals
NOTE The aim of leaving wire is to make good use of it to avoid additional wraps needed to fix the new wire and to have as less
as possible of the cut ends (that could catch your beautiful cloth)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
STEP 17To make the next two petals cut 70 cm (276 in) of your 04 mm
(26 ga) wire Leave 3 cm (12 in) tail put the wire under the floral base Hold it underneath and proceed as in STEPS 12 to 15
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 18When you fill the first part of the petal cut off the tail and
continue weaving The cut end will remain invisible and secured under the wraps
STEP 19Once two petals are made attach the remaining wire like the
previous one and continue making petals (STEPS 17-18)
STEP 20At this stage you should have 4 remaining 04 mm (26 ga) tailsThree of them will fix the circle base you prepared at the
beginning of this lesson one will be used to fix the silver beads one is reserved for the pearl and the shorter one remaining on 1 mm (1 mm (18 ga)) tails wrapped together will secure
the pendant hook
STEP 21Take the circle you made in STEP 1-3 and look if any
adjustment is needed The circle should touch the bottom of every petal when placed inside the flower
STEP 22To make the circle bigger open it a bit in a way the two ends
meet To make it smaller just cut off some wireYou can slightly hammer the adjusted circle but it is not
necessary
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 27Attach the silver beads around the board using one of two remaining wires In case it
breaks remove the last bead coil the rest of the broken wire two or three times to secure the ending before cutting off its rest and continue with another wire The drawing below
shows how the wire should pass through
STEP 23Slide the circle on three wires With each of them coil 13 of the circle base to the floral base The wraps shouldnrsquot be made
too close to each other
STEP 24Choose the wire which is the most ldquotiredrdquo Coil it two or three times to secure ending and bend it toward the front side before you cut
it off
STEP 25Take silver beads (2 and 3 mm) as well as the pearl and check their arrangement on the floral shape Alternate 2 and 3 mm beads No need to the put beads symmetrically but try to
cover the empty and the ldquolesswell-donerdquo parts with 3mm beads
STEP 26TIP To change the perfectly round shape of the silver beads squeeze them irregularly with the bent nose pliers You can make it faster by stringing the beads on a spare wire as
shown on the photo
NOTE The beads should be closer and the wire wraps tighter than it is
shown Each time you cross the wire below pull
the wire towards the center of the flower
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 31Grab the short 04 mm (26 ga) tail and pass it once under the
circle base or other base element if there is no possibility to go through
While pulling the wire press the hook onto the back of the pendant Coil the wire once or twice next to the 1 mm (18 ga) loop and cut off
the rest of the wire you have just usedAt this stage you should have only one 04 mm (26 ga) tail
STEP 28The beads string should completely cover the circle base
When the beads are fixed the most important part is already done Do not cut off the remaining wire
Adjust the twisting 1 mm (18 ga) tails with the bent nose pliers
STEP 29Now you will make the pendant hook Start by the loops at
the ends of 1 mm (18 ga) tails
STEP 30Bend the tails in a way shown on the photo but do not press the
future hook onto the back of the pendant yet
NOTE The 1 mm (18 ga) wire itself is rigid enough to stay at its place but there will be always a small space between the back and the hook The loop you have just made
is to guarantee you do not lose your pendant if you wear it on a very thin chain
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
FINAL ADJUSTMENTSTo adjust the loops open each of them a little bit with the round
nose pliers and cut off some wire Then make smaller loops and press them to the back side of the pendant
Check with your fingers if there is no scratchy wire rest
STEP 32The hook on the back side is done I am holding the last third
wire between my fingers and thatrsquos why you donrsquot see it on the photo Do not cut it off for the moment It will be useful during the
oxidation process and you will fix the pearl with it
STEP 33Oxidize the silver element including few centimeters of the
wireMake sure that all precautions related to the product you use
are takenLet the piece dry off
STEP 34TIP To prevent the distortion of the silver beads string put a
spare bead (that you wonrsquot use any more or resistant to abrasives ndash in this tutorial I use a hematite bead) in the place where the pearl will be fixed Use steel wool to remove tarnish
from beads and petals outlineIf you want the silver to shine more use also a polishing
cloth
STEP 35Slip the pearl to the center and attach the wire to the flower by
coiling it a few timesNOTE As the wire you use to fix the pearl was also oxidized it will
not look different from the restAs you see on the photo loops on the back side of the pendant
are visible therefore they need adjustment
Your pendant is ready
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
HOW TO MAKE STUD EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to the stud earrings Once you
understand the principle of making and fixing the earring posts you will be able to make the stud earrings as you like
For these earrings you should use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the bead To make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire
for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weavingWire lengths will depend on how large earring you need as well as on the density of your weaving The earring posts should be made of 08
mm (20 ga) silver wire Two earrings nuts are needed I prefer the earring nuts like those on the photo with silicone inside They stick
better to the stud
MAINTENANCE TIPYour silver pendant will tarnish with time As the pearl is sensitive to
chemical and mechanical polishing you can make a protection with simple paper
Just cut off a piece of paper and wrap it around the beadKeep carefully the piece of paper on the pearl while
polishing
Some inspiration
HOW TO MAKE DANGLE EARRINGSIt is very easy to adapt the design to this type of earrings You
should just use thinner wires smaller silver beads and the beadNext fix (soldered) jump rings and lever-backs at your choice
IMPORTANT If you use the jump rings attach them when the flowers are ready But if you use the soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before
making loops on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTo make the earrings I use 06 mm (24 ga) wire for the base and 025 mm (30 ga) wire for weaving Wire lengths will depend on how large the earring will be and the density
of your weaving
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
The design is versatile You can also make a bracelet composed of elements like shown below or an element of a necklace
For such elements you should adjust the thickness of the wire the silver beads and the bead to the size of the element you want to
make Wire lengths will depend on the size of the piece as well as on the density of your weaving
Two necessary modifications of the project are shown below
First main difference concerns the round element from the Steps 3 21 22 and 23 Instead of the circle you should make
and fix an earring post like shown
Cut off the wire making the stud of about 10-11mm (04 in) long Polish the sharp end with a metal file
HOW TO MAKE A BRACELET OR A NECKLACE PIECE
The second modification concerns the wire tails (Steps 29 -32) Instead of making loops (Step 29) simply secure the wire trim the tails and polish their sharp ends Their
length should be less than the petal length so if pressed on the back (Step 30) they shall touch the round shape You do not have to fix them to the base but press
the tails well so they do not scratch the ear afterwards
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
IMPORTANT If you intend to use jump rings you attach them when the flower is ready But if you use soldered jump rings you should slip them on the tails (see Step 28) before making loops
on the tail ends (see Step 29) and continue workingTrim the tails and make loops like in Step 29 The hooks should touch in the middle Follow
Steps 30-33 Instead of fixing each hook to the flower base you have to put them together and wrap few times with the wires that normally you would use to attach the hooks
to the base
This piece needs two hooks so you have to modify the baseTake a close look at the tail end shown in the red circle it is useful while working Make a shape like on the photo by folding a longer wire in half Leave a tail and start to form petals I like
securing the wire with a piece of masking tape but it is not necessary Fill the petals as shown in Steps 8-20 and then fix silver
beds
Here you can see a piece already finished
I am glad to present you this very useful and easy to put into practice method that will make your work easier
Let me show you how you can permanently soften the sterling silver wire with household tool You need
MATERIAL LIST Sterling silver wire (930)
TOOL LISTpair of pliers (or two) with non-heating conductive material as part of the handles gas stove recipient with cold water fine steel wool or any tarnish remover product Optionally flux and a small paintbrush to apply the flux
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 3Place a part of wire in the bright ends of the flames Judge whether the silver is annealed by the color it turns while in the heat Sterling silver anneals between 1100 and 1200 degrees You need a dark red color A faint red is only at 700-900
degrees and will not anneal the metal
STEP 2Grab the wire with your pliers (I like bent nose pliers the best)
It is better to use 2 pairs of pliers with longer wire parts
NOTE Use pliers that have non-heating conductive material as part of the handles You can cool your pliers by quenching
them in the cold water
STEP 4Since sterling silver anneals rapidly it is not necessary to heat it
for very long It should be heated until it is a red color It takes only a while
The thinner wire is the quicker it is hot enough
Make sure you do not overheat the silver (if not it will become brittle) but also that all parts of the wire were heated evenly and
enough (if not the wire temper will vary)
STEP 1Prepare the wire you would like to soften a pair of pliers and a
recipient with cold water to quench the wireBefore you remove the grates from the stove be sure they are cool
to touch Then turn the stove on Pay attention to what youre doing Dont have anything flammable close to your flame
If itrsquos possible turn the lights off It is much easier to gauge the color of the silver in a darkened area
If you have flux solution apply it on the silver (dip the wire into the flux or use a small paintbrush)
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
STEP 6The wire is permanently softened (it does not have to be hot to be soft and it remains soft unless you work it too many times You can
harden the jewelry piece by hammering or tumble polishingI clean the wire with the fine steel wool but you can also use a
tarnish remover product or boil the silver in water with citric acid
NOTE that this method is recommended rather for thicker sterling silver wire starting from 08 mm and above If you need to anneal thinner wire just grab two ends of the wire with two pairs of
pliers and quickly pass the whole wire through the fire It doesnrsquot have to get red In most cases just heating will be enough
NOTE This method works with bronze and alpaca silver too
The difference is that in bronze and in the alpaca the oxidation is more than with sterling silver so you have to clean them a little more
Your wire is ready for further work
STEP 5You should proceed little by little Do not let your silver air cool
especially with thicker wire Quench it in cold water as soon as the glow from the heat is gone If you let silver air cool the outside of the wire cools sooner than the interior It should be ready at
once
Remember to turn the stove down Be careful with the pliers they need much more time to cool off
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Edelweiss Pendant
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Joanna Kun
My name is Joanna I am from Warsaw Poland I fell in love with wire wrappedjewelry in 2006 Since then I have learned a lot and developed my owntechnique
Now I am a single mom with a corporate job so I must be extremely organizedbut I am still able to devote some time to create something as my friends andfriends of the friends still require earrings from me )
I am also a proud owner of a jewelry business helping other jewelry makers toget high quality supplies
Thank you for stopping by -)wwwetsycomshopSilverDetails
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire wrapping is so much fun and the designs that you can come up with is simply amazing Whether you see them in stores at supermarkets or at small stalls or online shops you can
never have enough of them So in todays article I present to you wire wrapped beauties for you to feast your eyes on
Up first in this article are wire wrapped bracelets With or without pearls and beads big or small the designs designed by these jewelry designers are top notch Imagine these
wrapped around your wrists
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by LacyLoveWireWrap by EndeavorsJewelry by LacyLoveWireWrapby BeyhanAkman
by Sptiby SashaStoutsby HyppieChic
Wire wrapped rings are also amazing Look at the rings below in all their glory Beautiful wire wrapped rings just for you and I
by Kissedbyclover by BeyhanAkman by SergKruk by holmescraft
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Wire Wrapped Beauties
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Or perhaps a pair of earrings that you can show off how beautifully handmade these are Check them out and maybe you will be the proud owner of this lovelies
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
by GearsFactory
by elainesgemsby PolymerPlayinby 7Stone
Wrapping pendants are a great idea as well You can literally create any shape of a wire pendant or wrap around stones and then have your own shape
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
They say horseshoe is for luck so heres a pair of earrings hoping will give you luckwhen it comes to fashion Creating the earrings will teach you how to shape wireswrap and create ear studs
The tutorial is catered for intermediate It has clear instructions and ultra-clearcloseup photos at each step Additionally you can ask me question you have onthe tutorial No more getting stuck and frustrated on a confusing or just plaininaccurate pattern
If you followed this tutorial and then sell the accessory or jewelry please give creditto the author or DIY Beading Clubcom
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Materials Needed18ga or 20ga Craft wire28ga Craft wire4mm pearlsE600 Craft glue
Tools NeededWire cutterRound nose pliersFlat nose pliersMandrel
Skill LevelIntermediate
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 1Cut 7 inches 20ga wire Using your round nose pliersbend the wire and make a loopat the center
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 2Starting from the loop measure 225 inches and thenmake a loop again
Do the same with the other wire
Step 3 You need to align the loops so cut 28ga wire and wrap the loops on both sides
Step 4 Use your mandrel or any rounded object to form a horseshoe shape
Side view
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Step 5Cut 8-inch 28ga wire and start wrapping your 4mmpearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
After wrapping one pearl wrap the wire without apearl at least 8-10 times and then continue to wrapanother pearl
Step 6 Cut 5 inches 20ga wire Bend one end of the wire at 1-inch mark
Then at the 1-inch mark start making a small loop This will be your 1st round
Set aside
and continue to make rounds at least 3 more times
Step 7Now cut the extended part and leave at least 05 inch wire
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Dab E600 craft glue at the bottom part of the spiralInsert the extended wire into theloop and carefully press onto the loop of the earringframe Do not put a lot of glue asit might smear onto the pearls
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat from Step 1 and create a pair
Let dry for a while and then voila you have your earstud
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Lucky Stud Earrings
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Sky Aldovino
I consider myself a late bloomer when it comes to crafting Irsquom a self-taughtjewelry maker Jewelry making wasnrsquot really a hobby of mine but unforeseenevents lead me to learn jewelry making My family put up a craft store wherewe sell cross stitch beads and all sorts of crafting materials I fell in love withthe beads and tried to create accessories only for myself Clients liked thepieces and I started customizing handmade jewelry The craft store was asuccess for 6 years but like any other small businesses we had to close itdown and I was confined to staying at home While at home I had all the timeusing the internet and now working as a home-based jewelry designer
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Viking Knit with Bead Cap TutorialSubmission Type step-by-step-drivenProject Skill level Intermediate wire working experienceTime to Fully Complete Project One dayDimensions The Viking knit piece is approx 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo longStep-by-Step photos with instructions
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Supplies- 1x 70rdquo of 24ga wire- 26rdquo of 24ga wire- 6-7rdquo of scrap wire- 2x 9rdquo of 20ga wireThe silver wire used in this tutorial is silver plated non-tarnish wireSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools- Business card or credit card- 14rdquo dowel rod- 13rdquo dowel rod- Viking knit draw plate- Wire cutters- Round nose pliers- Bend nose pliers- Wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)- Nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers)
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Take a business card and wrap the 26rdquo 24ga piece of wire around it 5-6 times making 5
loops Remove the business card
The supplies make one piece of Viking knit
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 14rdquo dowel through the 5 looped prongs of wire Pull the wire loops snug against the dowel rod Use one of the end wires and wrap it around all the wire about frac34rdquo from the end
making a bunch
Make sure you have 5 looped prongs on the long end of the wires Spread out the 5 looped prongs of wire Twist the wire looped prongs leaving a small loop at the end
Step 2Using the 38rdquo dowel rod arrange the wire looped prongs on the end of the dowel rod
Press the wire loops against the dowel rod (photo 8) Try to space the loops evenly around the dowel rod
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Take the 6-7rdquo piece of scrap wire and wrap it around the 5 wire looped prongs on the dowel rod Twist the wire snug against the dowel rod
Push the ends of the twisted wire up and out of the way
Step 3I will be using black wire so you can see the photo instructions more clearly Take the 70rdquo 24ga piece of wire and run it under one of the looped prongs Leave a tail of about 2rdquo Then take
the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Pull the wire down and across to make a small loop Take the long end of the wire and run it behind the next two looped prongs
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Repeat this until you have finished one row To began the second row run your wire under the first small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the
bottom of the loop
Tips Try to keep your loops even in size and in a straight line down Donrsquot let your viking knit get too tight otherwise you
will have a hard time pulling it off the dowel rod Keep making making loops and rows until your viking knit measures approx 1 frac12rdquo long (photo 20) You should have approx 12-13
rows of loops
Move the 2rdquo tail end piece of black wire up and out of the way Run your wire under the next small loop from the first row Make sure the wire is behind the loop behind the X at the bottom
of the loop Keep repeating this until you and finished the second row
Step 4Pull the viking knit off the dowel rod Pull off the scrap wire that was holding the wire looped
prongs down
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Hold on to the ends and run the viking knit through the 716rdquo hole Then run the viking knit through the 38rdquo hole the 516rdquo hole and then the frac14rdquo hole
I like my viking knit to be frac14rdquo in thickness Tips If you run the viking knit through any of the smaller holes your viking knit will become thinner and longer The bead caps we will be making work best on viking knit with frac14rdquo thickness Your viking knit piece should look like this Use your wire
cutters and cut off the long ends Be sure not to cut any of your viking knit
Your Viking knit should look as depicted in the photo Cut off the single wire ends at each end of the viking knit End the wire ends to about frac14rdquo long
Use the round nose pliers and tuck the ends into the rest of the viking knit Your viking knit piece should look like this If you already have bead caps ends for your viking knit your piece is
finished and ready to be made into jewelry Repeat Steps 1-4 1x for a total of 2 Viking knit pieces
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 5Gently push the ends of the viking knit in a little so the bead caps we are going to make will fit better on the the ends Take a piece the 9rdquo 20ga wire and loop it aroung the middle section of
your wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers)
You want to make an about 5mm loop Use your nylon jaw pliers (or bent nose pliers) to wrap the wire flat around in a circle twice
Your wire should look like this Next wrap the wire around the frac14rdquo dowel rod
Wrap all the wire around the dowel rod Leave the end wire sticking out just a little Push the bead cap to the end of the dowel rod Push the end of the wire over and cover the end of
the dowel rod
Your piece should look like this Next use your bend nosed pliers and bend the end of the wire into the bead cap
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Tip You want the end of the wire to lie very flat on the inside of the bead cap Your viking knit needs to fit into this end of the
bead cap
Repeat Step 5 3x for a total of 4 wire bead capsYour piece is finished and ready to be made into jewelry
Love Knot Chainmaille
Submission Type step-by-step-driven Project Skill level Intermediate chainmaille experience Time to Fully Complete Project One evening Dimensions Approx 2 34rdquo longStep-by-Step photos
Supplies - 24x 8mm 20ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings - 6x 5mm 18ga gold non-tarnish open jump rings- 8x 8mm 18ga square silver non-tarnish open jump ringsSource httpswwwetsycomshopUnkamenSupplies
Tools - 2x bend nosed pliers or nylon jaw pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1
Repeat Step 1 3x to make a total of 4 love knots
Step 2
Your love knot chainmaille is finished
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Golden Silver Scrolling Aurae Bracelet Submission Type step-by-step-driven
Project Skill level Beginner to Intermediate Time to Fully Complete Project One evening
Dimensions Approx 8rdquo long
Step-by-Step photos with instructions
This bracelet is approx 8rdquo long The bracelet can be made larger by adding more Swarovski crystals beads to the bracelet The bracelet can also be made larger
adding more rows to your Viking knit pieces
The bracelet can be made smaller by leaving out 1x chainmaille love knot
Supplies- 1x 9mm by 14mm lampwork scrolling aurae bead or any bead that you like - 2x 7mm by12mm lampwork scrolling aurae beads or any beads that you like- 10rdquo of 18ga non-tarnish silver wire- 6x 8mm disc silver bead - 4x Swarovski crystal beads 6mm bicone- 1x piece of Viking knit 2rdquo-2 frac14rdquo long - 2x Viking knit bead caps- 1x piece of love knot chainmaille 2 frac34rdquo long- 1x 2rdquo silver headpin- 2x 3mm silver ball beads- 1x 8mm pave bead - 3x 6mm 18ga silver jump ring- 1x 14mm silver toggle
Tools - Wire looping pliers or round nosed-pliers - Round nosed-pliers- Cutting pliers- Bent needle-nosed pliers
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Step 1Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo
18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Step 2Take one Viking knit bead cap and thread it on the 10rdquo of 18ga wire Make sure the larger
opening end of the Viking knit bead cap goes next to the Viking knit The viking knit should fit right into the Viking knit bead cap
Thread another Viking knit bead cap 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc
bead 1x 9mm by 14mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x Swarovski crystal bead 1x 8mm disc bead 1x 7mm by 12mm aurae lampwork bead 1x 8mm disc bead and 1x
Swarovski crystal bead
Step 3Take 1x 2rdquo head pin and add 1x 3mm silver ball bead 1x 8mm pave bead and 1x 3mm silver ball bead Loop the headpin around with the wire looping pliers (or round nose pliers) close to
the 3mm silver ball bead
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Wrap the wire around the head pin Cut off the excess headpin with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap
Run 1x 6mm open silver jump ring through the loop on the 8mm pave bead Put the pave bead pendant aside
Step 4Make sure there are no gaps between the beads Using your wire looping pliers or round-nose pliers make a 4-5mm loop at the end of the 10rdquo 18ga silver wire Leave a 1 frac12rdquo tail Wrap the
wire end around the wire about 2 times
Cut the end of the wire with the wire cutters Use the bent needle nosed pliers to tuck the end of the wire close to the wire wrap Put the 8mm pave bead with the 6mm open jump ring
through the 4-5mm wire loop at the end of the bracelet
Close the 6mm silver jump ring Take the love knot chainmaille piece and open the end 8mm silver square jump ring
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Run the 8mm silver square jump ring through the 4-5mm loop at the end of the braceletClose the 8mm silver square jump ring
Step 5Open 2x 6mm silver jump ring and run it through each piece of the
toggle
Take the lsquoTrsquo part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the 8mm square silver closed jump ring at the end of the love knot chainmaille Close the jump ring
Take the round part of the toggle and run the 6mm silver jump ring through the loop at the end of the Viking knit Close the jump ring
Your bracelet is finished and ready to wear
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Golden Silver ScrollingAurae Bracelet
BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
About the Author
Carolyn Conley
Set against the rich backdrop of the red rock high desert and the azure-huedsky of Northern Arizona is the small studio of CC Design Owner and lampworkbead artist and jewelry designer Carolyn Conley has created and soldlampwork beads and jewelry since 2000 The unique forms colors and detailsof her masterful artwork allows Carolyn to travel to several craft and art showsthroughout Arizona selling her work as well as to operate a full Etsy shopwhere she does business as a Self Represented Artist (SRA)
Carolyn ConleyCC Designwwwbeadsbyccdesigncomhttpswwwetsycomshopcarolynsbeadshttpswwwetsycomshopccjewelrydesignhttpsfacebookcombeadsbyccdesign
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wire Wrapping The Basics
And Beyond
This wonderful new book from Jewelry Artist and Author JimMcIntosh takes you from the basics of wire art to some veryadvanced concepts of design
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
A Beginners Guide to Wire
Wrapping
Working with wire has endless possibilities The techniquesshown in this book are a beginners guide to making pendantsand bead links
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Fine Art Wire Weaving
Wire jewelry has never been more popular--but youve neverseen projects like this before
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM
Rec
omm
end
ed R
ead
ings
Wirework wDVD
Wirework with DVD is a step-by-step guide for theintermediate artist seeking new design possibilities combinedwith solid technique instruction
BLOG DIY JEWELRY MAKING ISSUE 40BLOG WWWHANDMADE-JEWELRY-CLUBCOM MEMBERSHIP WWWDIYJEWELRYMAKINGCOM